JP7409977B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed on the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter becoming level 4, multiple super reach There is one in which any one of the reach effects is executed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2015-221121A

However, in Patent Document 1, the problem is that one of the plurality of reach effects of super reach is only executed based on the change in the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the enjoyment of the game cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as the suggestion performance suggesting control to be in the advantageous state. and,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
When the start effect related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed, and in the subsequent period, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is performed. Displays information,
The guide light emitting means performs the guide light emission after turning off the light emitting means when executing the first guide display.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (e.g., reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, Executing multiple types of suggestion performances including reach performance A), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) Possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. a means for displaying guidance;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The development suggestion performance execution means executes, as the development suggestion performance, a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η) , the part where the meter effect can be executed during the execution of reach effect A and during the execution of reach effect B),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (the part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
The second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control in the advantageous state has ended.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is announced is excessively long, which reduces the interest in the game. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where the special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the advantageous state will be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Moreover, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance.
In addition, an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction can be suitably executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, during execution of a jackpot start effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2014-147575, a player is encouraged to shoot a game ball to the right by operating a ball shooting handle. Some were configured to give right-handed instructions. However, there is still room for improvement in the instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, is completed, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
The second guidance display is continued in the special state after the control in the advantageous state has ended.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a timing chart showing the presentation period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the performance in the case of executing the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage performance and the second stage performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the performance control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a look-ahead notice performance setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of meter effect determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not a meter performance is executed and the determination ratio of performance patterns, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each performance pattern. 5 is a timing chart showing first to fifth timings in each variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance E development suggestion performance determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of branch destination suggestion performance decision processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of the performance pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern of branch destination suggestion performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance G development suggestion performance determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing the ratio of ready-to-reach effects determined when hitting the jackpot, (B) is a diagram showing the ratio determining ready-to-reach effects when winning, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach effects C and D. , (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ at the time of jackpot, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ at the time of jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of chance up effect decision processing. It is an explanatory diagram of an executable period of chance up performance during each reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram of a performance that can be executed as a chance-up performance. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up performance is executed in each reach performance and the performance pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the performance pattern of the chance-up performance in each reach performance. be. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of active display in a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of performance patterns in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the length of a revival performance in a modified example. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. In addition, the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", it is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be made to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common winning judgment value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving hit or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot determination value within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, it can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment values within the common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the fluctuating special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the percentage of variable display results with time-saving and losing is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 029SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. This feature section 029SG includes invention 029SG and invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of form 1 of invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for a player,
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (e.g., reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, Executing multiple types of suggestion performances including reach performance A), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) Possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (The part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is announced is excessively long, which reduces the interest in the game. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where the special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the advantageous state will be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The performance period of the second suggestion performance is longer than the performance period of the first suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach performance B is longer than the execution period of the reach performance A the part set longer than the period length L1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, unlike the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance does not execute the development performance before the performance result is announced, so even if the special development performance is not performed, the corresponding 2. It is possible to surely draw the attention of the player to whether or not control to an advantageous state is reported as a performance result of the 2-suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, it is decided to execute the meter performance, in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined, After determining execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means is
As the development suggestion performance, a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, when reach effect A is being executed and Part where meter effect can be performed while reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance by the special development suggestion performance. can.

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, it is possible to execute as three development patterns without going through the execution of reach effect A or reach effect B. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance are not executed, the special development performance is executed and the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the highly anticipated special suggestion performance will be executed. As a result, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
During the period from when the special development performance is executed until when the special suggestion performance is executed and it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled, the third suggestion performance is executed after the special development performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance to the time when the reach performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced) The length L13 of the period up to the end timing of I (notification timing of variable display results) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a special development effect with high expectations is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to Form 6 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means includes a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages, and a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests the execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages. It is possible to perform a special development suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance E development suggestion performance) that suggests the execution of a special development performance,
The rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54 As shown, the meter effect changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in 5 steps (6 steps if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed), whereas the reach effect E development suggestion effect changes the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image. (the part where changes in two steps),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed and the second suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than with a suggestive presentation, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the number of stages changes to a specific number, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Form 7 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6,
The period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed is longer than the period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, the period in which the special development suggestion performance is executed is In the variable display with a variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, the fourth suggestion performance indicates that the third suggestion performance, which has higher expectations than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed. Since the suggestion can be made for a longer period of time than the execution, the interest of the special development suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6 or Form 7,
In the case where the second suggestion performance is executed, the development suggestion performance execution means does not execute the special development suggestion performance until the performance result of the second suggestion performance is notified (for example, a reach performance). E development suggestion performance is the part that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special development suggestion performance is executed during the execution of the second suggestion performance, the player recognizes that the player is informed that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion performance. It is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to

The gaming machine according to Form 9 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
An advantageous result suggesting performance (for example, a chance-up performance) that suggests that the performance result of the suggesting performance will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the suggesting performance, and a configuration that constitutes the advantageous result suggesting performance. Advantageous result suggestion performance execution means that makes the suggestion based on the number of executions of the performance (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up performance in the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) (a part that executes mid-production processing),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of executions of the constituent effects when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). Thus, while the reach effect F is being executed, a total of three effects are displayed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. While it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U, while reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect. A total of two performances of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up production can be executed in pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). As shown in the above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects can be executed as effects that constitute the chance increase effect: the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance increase effect is set to pattern S and pattern Q). On the other hand, during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, are performed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. The part where the effect can be executed (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the special development performance is executed and the third suggestion performance is further executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, the first suggestion performance is executed. By increasing the number of executions of the component effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed than when the third suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect of the third suggestion effect more favorably. Regarding the case where the special development performance is executed and the 4th suggestion performance is further executed after it is announced that the control is not in an advantageous state as a result of the 2nd suggestion performance, the configuration performance when the 4th suggestion performance is being executed. By making the number of executions of the constituent effects less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the performance result of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, chance-up performance) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion performance of the common aspect is executed, the expectation level differs depending on the type of the suggestion performance in which the advantageous result suggestion performance was executed (for example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-12, the reach title (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of modes of advantageous result suggestion performances and to draw the player's attention to which suggestion performance is executed during which common mode advantageous result suggestion performances are executed. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 11 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9 or Form 10,
The suggestion performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestion performance when executing the suggestion performance, and displays the expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-5, when changing the text of the reach title image to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, it is displayed together with the reach title image. Changing the display mode of the expectation image showing the expected jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous outcome suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the expectation level of the suggestion effect. can be recognized.

The gaming machine of Form 12 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 11,
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, deformation) that is different from the suggestion effect and that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled by the display mode of a specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect. A specific image suggestion effect execution means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1) that can execute The active display is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes in the display area 029SG005F, and the jackpot expectation level is varied depending on which display mode the active display is displayed.
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion performance as the specific image suggestion performance in common among all of the different types of suggestion performances (for example, by setting the active display to a white round shape, Areas that can be displayed as blue circles and red circles),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect that is executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is that the common specific image suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. Lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modification 029SG-1, variable display as a result of reach effect A) In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed before the result is announced and the reach performance F is further executed, an active display is displayed while the reach performance A is being executed. The rate P2 at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is the same as when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach effect F is being executed. (portion lower than P3),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect that is executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect that is executed after the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect of the reach effect B. Display mode of active display during execution of reach effect E in variable display of variable pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E development notification effect is executed after variable display result (missing) is announced and reach effect E is further executed (the part where the rate of change from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is higher than P1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion performance and the fourth suggestion performance, the common specific image suggestion performance is appropriately executed according to the level of expectation, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means changes the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode (for example, It can be changed into any of multiple aspects including red round shape),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development effect is executed ( For example, as shown in modification 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. In addition to setting the rate P3 of the change in the shape of the active display to be higher than the rate P2 of the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, super reach ζ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E is set to (The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect, so that the game It is possible to reduce the possibility that interest in the game will decrease due to the player being recognized in advance as having high expectations.

The gaming machine of Form 14 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-9, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, high expectations can be achieved from the timing before reach when reach effect A or reach effect B is not executed. The part where reach performance development notification performance is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the rate at which the specific image is displayed after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. The mode is higher than the rate at which the mode changes to the second mode (for example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is changed before the start of reach effect I) The rate P5 at which the icon changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is determined by the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach effect I. (the part set higher than the ratio P6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the special suggestion performance, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the special suggestion performance will be executed.

The gaming machine according to Form 15 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 12 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
A suspension storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a suspension storage;
a determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed when the variable display is started;
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory, a determining means capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed before the determination by the determining means (for example, in the winning random value determination process of Modification 029SG-4, the CPU 103 When the variation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, it is further determined which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display) (the part that determines whether the
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion performance execution means includes, as the specific image suggestion performance, a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed based on the determination result of the determination unit, and a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed. (For example, in modification 029SG-4, in addition to a round shape, triangles, squares, star shapes, etc. are provided as display formats for the pending memory table display, and the pending memory display is Depending on whether the shape is displayed, it is possible to suggest which reach effect will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, or reach effect I),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion performance even before the start of the variable display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Form 1 of invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I), and a first suggestion performance that has a lower expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance (for example, , reach performance C), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance D), and special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance G). (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
It is possible to execute a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D), the part where the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed After it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the performance, a special development performance different from the special development performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the variation of super reach θ In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D) (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
In the first development pattern, before the special development effect is executed, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIG. (the part that executes the variable display processing shown),
Equipped with
The first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), reach performance D has a higher jackpot expectation level than reach performance C),
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the part where reach performance I is further executed),
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the super reach In the variable display with a variation pattern of θ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance is executed, and then reach performance G is further executed. part),
When the special development performance is not executed after the predetermined performance is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion performance that is different from the special suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, In the variable display of the super reach ι in a variable pattern, after the precursor performance is executed, the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, and then the reach performance H is further executed),
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is In the case of a jackpot, that is, when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the determination ratio of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the variable display is variable. The portion higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the display),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is the length of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance) The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the first suggestion performance, and the rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the second suggestion performance. Different (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when reach effect C is executed, the rate at which high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect) is the part that is higher than the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance when reach performance D is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the presentation by combining the types of suggestion presentation and the type of development presentation, and it is also possible to create a predetermined relationship between suggestion presentation and development presentation. It can improve the interest of the performance.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A development advance performance execution means capable of executing a development advance performance before the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed (for example, a reach performance H development notification performance in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ι) (The part where the advance performance is executed from a timing earlier than the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
The development advance performance execution means is capable of executing the development advance performance that is common both when the special development performance is executed and when the specific development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51). , the part where a common form of pre-production is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the development advance performance, it is possible to increase attention to the development performance, and to draw the player's attention to whether the special development performance or the specific development performance will be executed as the development performance. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A special development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5), and a specific development that suggests the execution of the specific development performance. A suggestive effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern Y that displays a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect that suggests the execution of either the special development effect or the specific development effect (for example, , a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5); After determining execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process, the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to which of the special development suggestion performance, specific development suggestion performance, and common development suggestion performance will be executed as the development suggestion performance, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The second development is greater than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 ( As shown in D), the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, and the reach performance Regarding the variation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as performance C or reach performance D, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the super reach κ The difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern is 60%, while the difference in the rate at which reach effect D is executed with the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach θ is (The part where the difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed, it is either the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess which of the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance will be executed, it is possible to make the game more interesting.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, modification 029SG- As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is expected that the second development pattern is the one in which the special development effect is executed. This will increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 6 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4 or Form 5,
The degree of expectation when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the degree of expectation when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of super reach θ in a variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level and the execution of reach effect D are determined when execution of reach effect C is determined. (the part where the expected jackpot is the same as when
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can look forward to the future, his/her interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 7 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the second suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-6, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, the case where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and the case where the reach effect is (a part where it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance at a different rate depending on the case of performance D),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different between the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different. Since the game can be played in a suitable manner, the game's interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the same as the first suggestion effect in the first development pattern. When the second suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion performance is performed during the execution of the second suggestion performance is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. , a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is determined and the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the first advantageous outcome suggestion presentation and the second advantageous outcome suggestion presentation that suggest that the presentation result will be an advantageous result is different between the first suggestion presentation and the second suggestion presentation. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suggest the performance results, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 7 or Form 8,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion performance is determined by the specific development performance or the special development performance after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance. The relationship with respect to the execution of is higher than the relationship with respect to the effect of the specific development effect or the effect of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A) As shown, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. , the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are whether or not it develops into any of reach performance G to reach performance I after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed, and whether these reach performance G to reach performance The part that is designed to be determined depending on which of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development performance and the second special development performance causes a specific development performance or special development performance to be executed close to the execution time of the first special development performance or the second special development performance. Therefore, by executing the first special development performance and the second special development performance, attention to the specific development performance or the special development performance can be increased, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 9,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development performance or the special development performance (for example, as shown in Modification 029SG-12) (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance, thereby increasing the degree of attention to either the first development pattern or the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to Form 11 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 10,
As a notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is announced that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once announced as a loss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is The ratio is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is executed when the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode (e.g. , as shown in modification example 029SG-7, when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by notifying the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance in the second notification mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and the performance of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance The first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is different between the case where the result is announced in the first notification mode and the case where the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the execution of the process can be shared, the amount of data required for the process can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to Form 12 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 11,
As a notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is announced that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once announced as a loss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the special development performance is executed after the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, in the suggestion performance executed after the special development performance, the In the case where it is announced that the control will be in an advantageous state, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is that the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed when the notification is made in the second notification mode is different (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-8, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is the reach performance C or After the reach performance D is executed and it is reported that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and the reach performance G When it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot as a performance result (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display is the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. (the proportion that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed, the first advantageous result is suggested depending on whether the special development performance is executed before being informed that the control will be in an advantageous state. Since the rate at which the performance or the second advantageous result suggesting performance is executed can be varied, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means executes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion performances including the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, branch destination suggestion performances of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). is executable,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous outcome suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in Figure 11-28, if the branch destination suggestion effect is pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z) The execution rate of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance differs depending on which stage it is executed in),
During the execution of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance, the special development performance is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance with the highest execution rate of the special development performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. In this case, the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance being executed is a performance result that notifies that the performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification example 029SG-9, There are cases where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, or the case where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed but the reach performance I (The part where it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot if it is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and also to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special development performance will be executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 029SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-1(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-1 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable or non-probable variable) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 11-1(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating the number of parts may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special pattern in the special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of the structure of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 029SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for determining the graphic display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 029SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 029SG using FIG. 11-4(B), in this feature section 029SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 029SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 11-5 shows a variation pattern in this characteristic part 029SG. In this characteristic part 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. In addition, in this feature part 029SG, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 029SG, the super reach variation patterns are super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super reach Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and only 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature part 029SG is the variation pattern of super reach α, the variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), the variation pattern where the result is out of the jackpot (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of super reach β. As a fluctuation pattern, there is a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ. ), a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern for super reach δ, a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε (PA2-5), and a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε. A variation pattern (PA2-6) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5) as a variation pattern in super reach ζ, a variation pattern in which the result is a jackpot (PA2-7), and a variation pattern in super reach η A variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-8) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern of super reach θ. The fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern that results in a variable display result as a jackpot (PB1-8) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach ι, the fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-10), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. As a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-9), a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-11), and a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern of super reach λ. ) and a deviation pattern (PA2-12) are provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern With some exceptions, the longer the special symbol fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special symbol variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the super reach alpha variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern is set to be longer than that of the super reach beta variation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern. The variation time is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach δ variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ζ variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ε variation pattern. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set longer than that of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach ι variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach κ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Of these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern are not provided with variation patterns in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot. In other words, for these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, of the variation patterns excluding the super reach δ variation patterns and super reach ε variation patterns, the super reach α variation pattern has the shortest special symbol variation time and The jackpot expectation level is set low, and the jackpot expectation level is set to increase as the special symbol fluctuation time becomes longer.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, a super reach λ variation pattern is provided as a super reach variation pattern that has a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach κ variation pattern. The super reach λ variation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special symbol variation time is longer than the super reach ζ variation pattern and shorter than the super reach η variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) changes the length of the execution period as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect A of L1 is executed and a variable display result is notified as the result of the ready-to-reach effect A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect B of (L2>L1) is executed and a variable display result is notified as the effect of the ready-to-reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), the super reach α variation pattern and the super reach β variation pattern vary from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of variable display results). It is also a variation pattern in which it is possible to execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect over the timing). In addition, as mentioned above, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, so the length of the execution period of the meter effect in the super reach β variation pattern is The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter performance executable period in the super reach α variation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a variable display result is announced as a result of these ready-to-reach effects C or D. Incidentally, the execution period of both the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D is set to the length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is such that during the execution period of reach effect C and reach effect D, after the variable display result is announced as the effect of reach effect C and reach effect D, reach effect H is further executed. Which one will be executed? The reach performance H development notification performance that notifies you that reach performance H development notification performance will notify you that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. It is also a fluctuating pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a reach effect B with an execution period of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, it is possible to execute a reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests development to reach performance E (length of executable period for reach performance E development suggestion performance: L6a) This is a fluctuating pattern that does not ultimately develop into reach performance E and notifies the failure. In addition, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, like the super reach β fluctuation pattern, is a fluctuation that allows the meter performance to be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) is used as reach effect of super reach during variable display, such as reach effect C or reach effect D (whichever reach effect). The length of the performance execution period is also variable. After executing L3) and notifying that the display result is a failure, it is possible to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance that suggests the development to the reach performance G, and finally reach This is a fluctuating pattern that notifies performance G without developing it. Further, the super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing the reach performance B and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, and the reach performance E development notification performance ( Length of the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect: This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after executing L6b). The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. In addition, the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. In addition, in the super reach ζ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes reach effect A as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, A high-expectation reach performance that notifies you that from the middle of the reach performance A, the reach performance A will be replaced by a reach performance with a high expectation of jackpot (for this feature, reach performance F or reach performance I, which will be described later). This is a variation pattern in which the development notification performance is executed for L7 (L7>L6b), which is longer than the execution period length L6b of the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect F is further executed. In addition, with the super reach η variation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when reach effect A switches to high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect A changes to high expectation reach in the middle) Since the performance is switched to the performance development notification performance, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. In addition, in the super reach η variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (notification timing of variable display results) is the reach performance in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance E is set to be longer than L11 (L12>L11).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any reach effect is L3), and after informing that the variable display result is a failure in these reach effects C or D, it is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect. , Furthermore, the reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that the reach performance G will develop is executed over L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. This is a variation pattern in which a reach effect G is further executed. Further, the super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. A reach performance H development notification is executed to inform that the reach performance H will be developed, and a preliminary performance and a precursor performance will be executed in place of the reach performance C or reach performance D from the middle of these reach performance C or reach performance D, and that the reach performance will further develop into reach performance H. This is a variation pattern in which a performance is executed and a reach performance H is executed. Further, the super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 and FIG. 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D as super reach effect during variable display. , and from the middle of reach performance C or reach performance D, perform a preliminary performance and a precursor performance instead of reach performance C or reach performance D, and further develop a high expectation reach performance whose execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) is the same as the high expectation level in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. It is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-win performance F.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a highly expected reach performance development whose execution period length is L7 from a timing earlier than the reach in other super reach fluctuation patterns during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. In addition, with the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (from the timing before the reach to the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect). Since the performance is executed, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4>L4'>L4'', which is even shorter than L4'. In addition, in the super reach λ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) is L13 (L13 >L12>L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG is by darkening the display area of the image display device 5. A blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect that displays the previous lines on the image display device 5 after the black-out effect, and a switching effect after the first-stage effect. , after the switching effect, displaying the last lines on the image display device 5; and after the subsequent effect, move the movable body 32 from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. A movable body performance is performed in which the movable body is caused to fall (move) to a performance position that overlaps the approximately central position.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance displays the content of the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. This is also an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the second-stage production displays, following the first-stage production, the content of the lines spoken by the character as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, This is an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the line in the first part is ``I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!'' and the line in the second part is ``Miracle Attack!''

More specifically, the first stage performance consists of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the line "You are not alone..." is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters "You are not alone..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" The text appears below the text "You're not alone...". In addition, the latter stage effect is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the word "miracle" are displayed. In the second period, the words "Attack!" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

In other words, in the first stage performance and the second stage performance in this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage performance, and The number of characters displayed in the second period is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent stage effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the manner in which the lines are displayed in the first stage performance is different from the manner in which the lines are displayed in the second stage performance. It is arranged to be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (for example, "You are not alone...") is gradually changed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a manner that becomes larger and brighter (fade-in), and then consists of multiple characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!"), gradually becomes larger and brighter in the second period. It is displayed in a fade-in manner. In addition, after the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's strength!") is displayed the largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). and eventually disappear. Note that the character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the second stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamically displayed) as it rotates from the right side of the display screen toward the center of the display screen in the first period (dynamic display), and displays multiple character images 029SG008 (for example, "A", "T", "T", "K", "!") are displayed (frame-in) as if they were rotating from the bottom of the display screen to the center in the second period (dynamic display). be done. In addition, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed the largest and brightest, they move in a radial manner toward the surroundings, and then eventually disappear outside the display screen. It is displayed in a frame-out mode.

As shown in Figure 11-10(B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. . On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage rendering is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), faster in movement (speed of change in display mode (moving speed) due to frame-in), and higher in brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage rendering. (See Figure 11-55).

In addition, if the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG008 in the latter stage performance are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in The size and brightness of a portion of the image may have an inverse relationship. Further, although the contents of the lines are different between the first stage performance and the second stage performance, at least a part of the content may be the same.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that makes up the serif is larger than when it is small, the degree of emphasis is higher when the shape is three-dimensional than the one that is two-dimensional, and the degree is emphasized when the character image is fast rather than slow. It can be said that the degree of emphasis is higher when the brightness is higher than when the brightness is low. In addition, although the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image have been exemplified in the latter stage rendering with a higher degree of emphasis than the earlier stage rendering, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage rendering It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image is higher than that of the character image of the preceding stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes, for example, for the thickness of characters, thicker ones are higher than thin ones, and for colors, higher saturation and brightness are higher than lower ones. Good too. Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the character image itself, the degree of emphasis may be increased by displaying a special image such as an effect image around the character image.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 029SG. In this feature section 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (Super reach η jackpot variation pattern), PB1-7 (Super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (Super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1 -9 (super reach κ jackpot variation pattern) and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set the determination ratio of PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest. , PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (Super reach η jackpot variation) pattern), PB1-7 (Super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (Super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1-9 (Super reach κ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-10 (Super reach λ jackpot variation pattern) (variation pattern)) (Decision ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting jackpot variation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5< PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to, and provides a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and at least two or more jackpot fluctuation patterns have different determination ratios. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), PA2 -4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε), PA2-7 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ζ) , PA2-8 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach η), PA2-9 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach κ) pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern with super reach λ deviation).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 029SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for a loss, the fluctuation pattern for a non-reach loss (PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss; If so, set the highest determination ratio for PA1-2, PA1-3 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is PA1-4, PA1-4 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is the highest, ), PA2-2 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach α), PA2-3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ) δ deviation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε deviation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation pattern), PA2-9 ( PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation) It is only necessary to set the ratio to be low (determination ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7 <PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern determination table as described above, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to be the lowest, and the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest. The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach η variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern. The expected jackpot is set higher than the expected jackpot. As for the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, as described above, only the variation patterns in the case where the variable display result is wrong are provided, so the jackpot expectation level is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in the feature section 029SG will be explained. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Furthermore, a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 029SG005D and the second pending memory display area 029SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending memory number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. . In this feature section 029SG, these pending displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and depending on which display mode the pending memory display is displayed, a jackpot can be won in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance (also referred to as a pending display preview performance) that changes the rate of control in the gaming state (jackpot expectation level).

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature section 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed that can change the display mode in five stages (six stages if the state of not performing the meter performance) is included as the aforementioned meter performance. .

The RAM 102 in this feature section 029SG includes a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 029SG152. , a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 029SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage part 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 029SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 11-13(A). Area 029SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 029SG191, a production control timer setting section 029SG192, a production control counter setting section 029SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 029SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 029SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 029SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this feature section 029SG, the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) has not yet been determined. In other words, with the occurrence of a new starting prize, a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (blue ○ ) or "2" (red circle) is set, a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D and the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. , in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the production control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 029SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special symbol holding memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 029SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 029SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 029SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (Step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 029SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 029SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 11-17) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 029SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 029SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result will be a "miss" in the variable display. In this case, the transmission settings of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss", are executed (step 029SGS128), and the time saving flag is checked to see if it is in the on state, that is. , it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (step 029SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 029SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), select and set the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpot (step 029SGS135), and step Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of retained memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 029SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Bye. In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it shows the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming status at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 029 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time when the variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is a high certainty state. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C", it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is selected (step 029 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029 SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. It will be determined whether to control it before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1"; If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3".

After the completion of step 029SGS155, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 029SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 029SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination at step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in which the time saving control is performed in the state or the time saving state (step 029SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the pending memory number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 is stored. By reading the value, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 029SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 029SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 029SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 029SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start changing the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 029SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern. The designation command, the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 029SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 029SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 029 SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), the CPU 103 determines in step 029SGS190 whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time saving number is in a high base state where the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 029SGS190;N). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 029SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 029SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process advances to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving number counter is set to "100". After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 029SGS214). After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is set to It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new storage of the starting winning command. is determined based on whether there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029 SGS242).

If there is no entry with the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry without the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command that indicates a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command that indicates a jackpot (Step 029SGS243; N), based on the variable display result being a jackpot, a jackpot (not shown) is detected. By referring to the pre-read preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(A). Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed in a blue round shape in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U, When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed as a red circle in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. Ru.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. However, it is sufficient to decide to execute the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243; Y), The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category with a "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is identified as a category with a "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is in the "other" variation pattern category including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in Figure 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined at a rate of 95% that the pre-read preview effect will not be executed. , the execution of the display pattern α of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. Then, if the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is "Super Reach", it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the pre-read preview effect in display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. , and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

Due to these settings, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect, so it is a target of the pre-read preview effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Furthermore, when the pre-read preview effect is executed, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot when the pre-read preview effect is executed with the display pattern β than when it is executed with the display pattern α. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern will be used to display the pending memory display that is the subject of the pre-read preview performance.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined at the same rate regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be varied depending on the jackpot type. By doing this, the player can control which jackpot type of jackpot game state will be controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead preview performance is executed and which display pattern the pending memory display is displayed. It is possible to attract attention.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance was determined in step 029SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After executing step 029SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a preview preview effect (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α that shows the pending memory display as a blue circle, "1" is set in the pending display flag of the entry, If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β that shows the pending memory display as a red circle, set the pending display flag of the entry to "2", and then proceed to step 029SGS252. .

In addition, in step 029SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250 ), proceed to step 029SGS252.

In addition, after executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 029SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B, or if it is the fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol , and a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process that determines whether or not to perform a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach fluctuation pattern. Determination is made (step 029SGS278). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern may be determined based on whether the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process that determines whether to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282), and if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance determination process.

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), branch A branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process advances to step 029SGS289, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is super reach ε or super reach κ. If it is a variation pattern of super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), a reach effect G development suggestion performance determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach effect G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the super reach performance to be executed during the variable display from the reach performance C and the reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), and A process table corresponding to the reach performance and variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is the super reach ι (PB1-8), execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in Figure 11-30 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach effect C is changed to 90. %, and the execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, if the variation pattern is super reach ε (PA2-6), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, if the variation pattern is the super reach ι (PA2-10), execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect κ (PA2-11), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in Figures 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), reach effect C and reach effect D are executed according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss. By determining different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the overall jackpot expectation level is set higher for reach effect D than for reach effect C.

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, if the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι (variation pattern in which the reach effect H development notification effect and the reach effect H are executed after the execution of the preliminary effect and the precursor effect) , execution of reach effect D is always determined. On the other hand, if the variable display is executed in the super reach κ variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed), the reach There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns (the variation patterns of super reach ι and the variation patterns of super reach κ) in which the preliminary performance and precursor performance are executed during variable display, this feature is applied after the preliminary performance and precursor performance are executed. In section 029, the rate at which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed (the rate at which the reach performance I with the highest expectation of jackpot is executed) is higher than the reach performance D when execution of the reach performance C is determined. is set higher than when execution is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if reach effect C, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than reach effect D, is executed during variable display, the preliminary effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the jackpot will be hit, the player will recognize that the level of expectation for a jackpot is low at the time when the reach effect C is executed, and the interest in the game will decrease while the reach effect C is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as reach effect C or reach effect D, and the variation pattern of super reach θ during execution of reach effect C or reach effect D. Comparing the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when advance performance, precursor performance, and high-expectation reach performance development notification performance are executed in place of reach performance C and reach performance D, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D). In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variable pattern is set to 60%. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-30 (E), in the case where the variable display result is off, the difference between the determination ratio of reach effect C and the determination ratio of reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40 %, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ will depend on which of reach effect C and reach effect D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of super reach κ, in which advance performance, precursor performance, and high expectation reach performance notification performance are executed during reach performance C or reach performance D, or as reach performance C or reach performance D. Once the variable display result (missing) is announced, it is possible to infer whether the variable display is super reach θ, in which reach performance G development notification performance is executed, so it is possible to estimate whether the variable display is the super reach θ, which is executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced, so the difference between reach performance C and reach performance D This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to which one is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up effect has been executed, which indicates that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) has increased during the variable display, and the corresponding chance. A chance-up performance determining process for determining a performance pattern for the up performance is executed (step 029SGS289).

The performance control CPU 120 that executed the chance up performance determination process next starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 213SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 213SGS291).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by -1 every time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the value of the process timer has timed out. do. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next What is necessary is to start the process timer and control the presentation device according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the main feature section 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is ended, If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS301;N) determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β. , super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter performance according to the fluctuation pattern. A performance pattern is determined (Step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (no shortening, non-reach), non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%, Execution of meter performance pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of meter performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , determines the execution of meter performance pattern D at a rate of 0%, determines the execution of meter performance pattern E at a rate of 0%, and determines the execution of meter performance pattern F at a rate of 0%. do. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 25%. The execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter performance pattern A The execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution of meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 40%. The execution of pattern D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern E of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach η, the non-execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 5%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of pattern A of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24 (B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (if it is a non-reach variable pattern without shortening, it is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach). This is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the variable display result notification period), and pattern B is a production pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step during the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, it is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (total increase of two steps) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , pattern C is the first timing, the second timing, and the period from reach to the start of the reach effect of super reach (for the variable pattern of normal reach, the period from reach to variable display result notification). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (increases by three steps in total).

In addition, in pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, second timing, third timing, and fourth timing when reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed (total increase of four steps). ) is a performance pattern. In addition, pattern E includes the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach effect start/stop) which is during execution of reach effect A and is later than the fourth timing. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (total increase of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the meter effect (step 029SGS304). If the execution of the meter effect has not been decided (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is ended, and if the execution of the meter effect has been decided (step 029SGS304; Y), the effect pattern of the determined meter effect is memorized. (Step 029SGS305), sets a meter performance start wait timer according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the meter performance determination process (Step 029SGS306).

In addition, when the execution of the meter effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the meter effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is set to 1. Determine whether or not it is out. At this time, if the meter performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for meter performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern of meter performance is selected, and the process timer for meter performance is started. Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the meter performance process timer is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the process timer for meter performance has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for meter performance, and if the process timer for meter performance has timed out, the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform meter effects during variable display.

As described above, in this feature part 029SG, by executing the meter effect during variable display, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to 5 levels, and by increasing the meter 029SG005M to 5 levels, the high expected level of reach is determined. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the performance development performance will be executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). . For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ, it is determined that the reach performance E development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 50%, Determine the execution of reach performance E development suggestion performance at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS311 (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312 ;Y) sets the ready-to-win performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer and ends the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process (step 029SGS313).

In addition, if the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance has been decided, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the value of the wait time for the start of the reach performance E development suggestion performance by 1 every time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance is decremented by -1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out. . If the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is better than the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate when the reach performance B is executed, the reach performance E development is It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). .

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , determine the execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach θ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 15%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is such that the image display device 5 executes the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Y that suggests the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance during the execution period of . This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Z that suggests execution of a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance during the execution period of D.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, among patterns X to pattern Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern In other words, pattern Z is a performance pattern in which the execution expectation of the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is higher than that of pattern , pattern Z > pattern X). In addition, when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, pattern Y is decided to be executed at a higher rate than pattern This is a performance pattern in which the execution expectation level of the development notification performance is high (reach performance H execution expectation level of the development notification performance: pattern Y>pattern Z, pattern Y>pattern X).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), the execution or non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the result of the variable display. The proportions are not different. In other words, the performance pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depend on whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I develops after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I will develop after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are determined depending on which direction the variable display will develop. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the branch destination suggestion performance has been determined in the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). If execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has not been decided (Step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is ended; if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has been decided (Step 029SGS232; Y), the decided branch The performance pattern of the destination suggestion performance is stored (step 029SGS323), a branch destination suggestion performance start wait timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion performance determination process is ended (step 029SGS324).

In addition, if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect processing is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determine whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the wait timer for starting a branch destination suggestion effect times out, a process table for branch destination suggestion effect is selected according to the performance pattern of the determined branch destination suggestion effect, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion effect is started. let Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is incremented by one, and it is determined whether the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance has timed out. If the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for branch destination suggestion production, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has timed out. If so, switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a branch destination suggestion effect during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, by displaying any of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, , it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, and the change is made to the preliminary effect. Furthermore, depending on which of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the preliminary effect is Since the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance and the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed are different, the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination are displayed on the image display device 5. The player's attention can be drawn to which of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the ready-to-win performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is set at a rate of 50%. , and the execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ, it is determined that the reach performance G development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS331 (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance (step 029SGS332 ;Y) sets a timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

In addition, if the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect process is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the production G exhibition suggested production start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out. . If the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer, and the reach production G exhibition suggestion production is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed in proportion, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, reach performance G development is executed after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, Furthermore, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the process ends. 029SGS341;N) further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ (step 029SGS342).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach α or super reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 controls the execution of the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A according to the variable display result. The presence/absence and effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the ready-to-reach presentation A to the ready-to-reach presentation I in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-32(A) to 11-32(E). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (A) to FIG. 11-32 (I), each of reach effect A to reach effect I includes a reach title display period in which the title of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5; It consists of a subsequent battle performance execution period in which the image display device 5 displays a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach titles can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body operation period during which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle performance execution period. A cut-in image displayable period is provided, and as part of the chance-up effect, the operation of the movable body 32 during the movable body operation possible period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be performed. (See Figure 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D, a branch destination suggestion performance execution possible period is provided after these movable body movement possible period and cut-in image display possible period.

In addition, regarding the battle execution period of reach effect E and reach effect F, the first half of the battle effect execution period is provided with a movable body movement period, and the second half of the battle effect execution period (the end of the battle effect (near the timing), an operation is performed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. An operation promotion image display period for displaying a promotion image is provided. Note that the operation promotion image display period is normally a period in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature section 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body operation period as part of the chance-up performance, and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period. (See Figure 11-33(B)).

Note that for the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I, a movable body operable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period are not provided. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performance in which chance-up performance is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the chance-up performance at a rate of 60%. The execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 0. Determined in percentage. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), proceed to step 029SGS347, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance A according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach α variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach η variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the process ends. 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect F and the effect pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (B), if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 40%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is decided. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of the pattern T of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern S, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance F (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance-up performance start timer for reach performance F in accordance with the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up performance determination process (Step 029SGS350).

In addition, in step 029SGS343, if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the production control CPU 120 controls the reach production according to the variable display result. B determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 11-34 (C), if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined that the chance-up effect will not be executed at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P will be executed. Execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution at a rate of pattern Q of chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution at a rate of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance B (step 029SGS352). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process advances to step 029SGS354, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ. If yes (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect E and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (D), if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined that the chance-up effect will not be executed at a rate of 60%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect will be executed. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%, execution at a rate of 5% for pattern T of chance-up effects, and execution at a rate of 0% for pattern U for chance-up effects. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern S is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern U of chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance E (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance-up performance start timer for reach performance E according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up performance determination process (Step 029SGS357).

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS342, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect The control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is either the super reach γ or super reach ε variation pattern (step 029SGS358).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is a variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D, according to the variable display result. A performance pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 60%. , the execution of pattern P of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 35%, the execution of pattern Q of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of pattern R of chance-up effect is decided. Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution of pattern P of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern Q of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern R of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 10%. Determined by the ratio of In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance C or the reach performance D (step 029SGS360). If it has not been decided to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended and the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. If it is decided to execute (Step 029 SGS360; Y), the determined performance pattern is stored, and a chance up performance start timer for reach performance C or reach performance D is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance up performance determination process is performed. (Step 029SGS361).

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the chance up performance, the performance control CPU 120 decreases the value of the chance up performance start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and sets the value of the chance up performance start wait timer to 1. Determine whether the value has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of chance up performance has timed out, a process table for chance up performance is selected and a process timer for chance up performance is started. Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for chance up performance is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for chance up performance has timed out. If the process timer for chance up effect has not timed out, control the effect device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for chance up effect, and if the process timer for chance up effect has timed out. , switches the process data, and starts the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a chance-up effect during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the degree of jackpot expectation varies depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. In fact, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the number of executions of the chance-up effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach performances with relatively low expectations for jackpots, such as reach performances A to D, chance-up performances are performed up to three times, so chance-up performances are performed while reach performances A to D are in progress. It is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of executions.

On the other hand, in reach performances with high expectations for jackpots such as reach performance G to reach performance I, the chance-up performance can only be performed once during the reach performance, so it is unnecessary to use the chance-up performance multiple times. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach performance with high expectations for a jackpot from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 11-34(E), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect A to reach effect D, pattern P displays the reach title in red, but the movement of the movable body 32 and Pattern Q is a production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a production pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed, but no cut-in image is displayed, and pattern R is the production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed. This is a performance pattern that executes all of the red display, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S displays the reach title in red, but does not match the movement of the movable body 32. Pattern Q is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, pattern Q is a performance pattern that displays the reach title in red and executes the movement of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and pattern R is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A. This is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A.

As mentioned above, as for the chance-up effect of this feature part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in reach effect A to reach effect D is as follows: When the effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. There is. When the chance-up performance is executed with pattern Q, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up performance is executed with pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern R, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern Q (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect A to reach effect D). Expectation level: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, as for the overall chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F, the expectation of jackpot is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S, The expected level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not performed. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F). Expectation level: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > non-execution).

Here, when comparing the case where reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and the case where reach effect E or reach effect F is executed, pattern P and pattern Q are common in reach effect A to reach effect D. While pattern R is set as an executable effect pattern, pattern R is executable only when reach effect B or reach effect D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in any of the reach effects A to D, while the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effects B and D. This is a performance that can be executed.

Also, when comparing the case where reach effect E is executed and the case where reach effect F is executed, it is found that in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S and pattern T are commonly set as executable effect patterns. On the other hand, pattern U can only be executed when reach effect F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in either reach effect E or reach effect F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image is the effect of reach effect F. This is a performance that can only be performed in

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where reach effect A is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, the title image of the reach effect A and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG251 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG161A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG161B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is finished, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A motion toward the production position is executed. The movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the performance position. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance A) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach η, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period. The meter 029SG005M increases by one step (up to 5 steps) and becomes full. Then, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle performance is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance. 029SG180 is displayed. Then, reach effect F is started. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

As shown in FIG. 11-37 (S) and FIG. 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, the title image of the reach effect F and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG256 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG166A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect F, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, the title image 029SG166B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

When the display of the title image of the reach effect F ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-37(U). During the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U is determined to execute the chance-up performance, the movable An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), a message is displayed to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) of super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Next, a case where reach effect B is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, which is the timing before reach, the second timing, and the third timing after reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40(E) and 11-40(F), when reach effect B is started, the title image of the reach effect B and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect B are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG252 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG162A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG162B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-41(H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A movement (movement) to an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance B) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (P) and Figure 11-42 (Q), after the cut-in image display period ends. When the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once announced that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect B) is finished, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect E development suggestion images 029SG170 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion execution possible period, the reach effect E development notification is displayed. As a performance, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, reach effect E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, the title image of the reach effect E is first displayed on the image display device 5, and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect E is displayed. An expectation level image 029SG255 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG165A with black title characters will be displayed as the title image of reach effect E, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U will be displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the effect pattern, title image 029SG165B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle performance, if the execution of the chance-up performance is determined by the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in Figures 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y), the movement An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 11-43(Z), FIG. 11-43(a), and FIG. 11-43(b), a message appears to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character A is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance E) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the performance mode of the reach performance E development suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 11-42(Q) to 11-42(T) will be explained in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45(A) to 11-45(B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is temporarily displayed as shown in FIGS. After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170. It is sufficient if the image has higher visibility from the player than the above image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect E development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. In addition, when reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach, meter effect is not executed, so explanation of the period from the start of variable display to reach effect will be omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) to 11-46(C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image and the expectation level image 029SG253 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG163A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG163B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C is finished, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(D) to 11-46(F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first A title image of the reach effect D and an expectation level image 029SG254 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG164A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect D, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up performance in the performance pattern, title image 029SG164B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-46(F).

In addition, during the battle performance of reach performance C or reach performance D, if the execution of chance up performance is determined by pattern Q or pattern R performance pattern, in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11- As shown in 47(H), the movement (movement) of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the intermediate position is executed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-47 (I) and FIG. 11-47 (J). is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47(K) to 11-47-(M), if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, a cut during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D After the in-image display period, a reach performance H development notification performance (reach performance H) is executed on the image display device 5 as a branch destination suggestion performance, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance (reach performance I) is executed. A branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) that suggests that a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is to be executed.

After the branch destination suggestion performance executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ, the ), when the reach effect C is executed, the variable display is notified that the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is reported that the variable display has failed because the friendly character D is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle performance. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), the reach effect If C is executed, the variable display will notify that a jackpot is achieved when ally character C wins over enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and if reach effect D is executed, the result of the battle effect will be announced. When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character A, the variable display is notified that the jackpot has been won. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, as shown in Figures 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V), the period in which branch destination suggestion effects can be executed ends. Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once reported that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect G development suggestion images 029SG171 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol will be When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion execution executable period, the reach effect G development notification As a performance, a reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, reach effect G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation level image 029SG257 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is finished, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-50(a) and 11-50(b). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-9) in which the super reach θ is off, the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d). As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50(e) and 11-50(f), the battle performance When the friendly character C wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in FIGS. 11-49(V) to FIG. 11-49(Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach presentation G development suggestion presentation, the first stage display of the ready-to-make presentation G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in FIGS. 11-54(C) to 11-54(D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171. It is sufficient if the image has higher visibility from the player than the above image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect G development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG182 is displayed and reach effect G is executed.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach ι variation pattern or a super reach κ variation pattern, the reach effect will be displayed as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). After the executable period of branch destination suggestion effect during execution of C or reach effect D, the shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary effect (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the preliminary effect ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect, and In response to the withdrawal of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. After image 029SG183 is displayed, reach effect H is executed. In addition, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIG. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

If the variable display variation pattern is a variable display of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52(k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first A title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H and an expectation level image 029SG258 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-reach effect H are displayed.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character C starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-52(l) and 11-52(m). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι (PA2-10), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o). As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ι jackpot variation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figures 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle performance When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character C as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in Figures 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach performance development When the ready-to-win effect I is started under the notification effect control, the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-reach effect I and the expectation level image 029SG259 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-win effect I are first displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, images of characters A to C are displayed together on the image display device 5 behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach effect I, so that the reach effect I is It creates a special feeling because the expectation of jackpot is higher than the reach performance.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach effect I is finished, as shown in FIGS. 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle effect between ally characters A to ally characters D and enemy character C is started. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w). As a result, when ally characters A to ally characters D are defeated by enemy character C, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a failure. be done.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle performance As a performance result, when ally characters A to ally characters D win against enemy character C, the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating a jackpot. Is displayed.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance from Figure 11-37 (R) to Figure 11-37 (T) and Figure 11-53 (r) to Figure 11-53 (s). .

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high-expected reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F or the reach performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A highly anticipated reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed to notify that I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. is executed.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.), and making it difficult to see the display screen itself. At the same time, the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered than before the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. Furthermore, the light intensity of the various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is checked before execution of the high-expected reach performance development notification performance. By lowering it more than that, it becomes even more difficult to visually recognize other performance images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.).

After the blackout effect is executed, the image of the character C is displayed as a preliminary effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). Furthermore, in the first stage performance, the content of the lines spoken by the character C is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55(D) and 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first stage performance ends, and a second stage performance is performed after the end of the switching performance. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. Note that although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of a plurality of images may be displayed as a switching effect. may be displayed. In addition, when any one of a plurality of images can be displayed as a switching effect in this way, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be varied depending on which image is displayed.

In the latter stage production, as described above, the lines spoken by the characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as the character image 029SG008, and the lines are outputted as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed during the first stage performance, but the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10). .

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage performance ends, the movable body performance is executed. As the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position which is the upper position of the image display device 5 to the effect position which overlaps with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the production position is moved to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable object effect is finished, as shown in Figure 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, the reach effect F. If the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, reach effect I) is executed.

Next, variable display in a variation pattern of super reach λ will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display using the variation pattern of the super reach λ, when the variable display starts, at the second timing before the reach The meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the 5th stage and becomes full. Next, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed. Is displayed.

Then, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed without becoming a reach or executing any of the reach performance A to reach performance D. Incidentally, the performance mode of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is the same as the performance mode described above with reference to FIG. 11-55. After the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance, as shown in FIG. 11-53, the reach performance I is executed and finally it is announced that the variable display result is a loss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is determined by the reach performance E development notification performance. The execution period length of the performance is set to be longer than L6b, and the reach performance E is executed after the reach performance E development notification performance is started, and the variable display result is a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance E. The length of the period L11 until the notification is made is that after the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F is executed, and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. L12, the length of the period from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, in the case where reach effect E is executed after execution of reach effect E development suggestion effect, the period until it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot. It is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to an excessively long period of time. In addition, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the highly expected reach performance development notification performance, the player is suitably made to pay attention to the reach performance I before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, so it is longer than the execution period L2 of the reach effect B. The player's attention can be drawn to the reach performance B over a period of time, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, reach effect B differs from reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is announced as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, the player is surely made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance B. It is now possible.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed, a meter effect may be executed as a effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation level reach effect development notification effect. Therefore, by executing the meter performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation level reach effect development notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect Alternatively, or in addition, the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance may be suggested by the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a mode in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A or the reach effect B is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C or the reach effect Even when executing D, it may be possible to perform meter effects. In particular, in the variable display of super reach κ in which the advance performance and precursor performance are executed from the middle of reach performance C and reach performance D, and then the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed. , a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies execution of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) triggered by advance performance or omen performance. By doing this, by variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι and variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the preliminary effect or the precursor effect. Since the player's attention can be drawn to the game, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at the second timing without going through the execution of reach effect A. Since the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is executed, even if the reach performance A is not executed, the player is not aware that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when reach performance B is executed, high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a case may be provided in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the execution of the reach performance B. By doing this, even when reach effect B is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect and reach effect I will be executed. You can improve your interest.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more stages at any timing. Furthermore, when providing a timing in which the meter 029SG005M increases by two or more steps at any one of the first timing to the fifth timing, the meter 029SG005M increases at a timing before reach effect A or reach effect B starts. The rate of development to the ready-to-reach effect I may be different depending on the case where the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at the timing after the ready-to-reach effect A or the ready-to-reach effect B is started. In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, a mode in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode may be changeable in four or less steps or six or more steps.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, after the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is the jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. The length of the period L13 until the notification is made is from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Since the length of the period is set to be longer than L12, the jackpot gaming state is controlled by lengthening the period until the performance result is announced when reach performance I, which has a higher jackpot expectation, is executed. It is possible to effectively increase expectations for

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, in this feature section 029SG, the meter performance that suggests the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance reaches a maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step over five stages (six stages if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the reach performance E in this feature section 029SG changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 over two stages. This is a performance that continues. In other words, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 levels, but as a reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 levels. It can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter performance, the target image (meter 029SG005M) changes more easily up to the 5th stage than in the reach performance E development suggestion performance, so the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, while the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as a meter effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 2nd level as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changeable up to the fifth stage as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. In addition, in this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th stage as the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th level. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display of the super reach δ and super reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the length L5 of the period in which the meter effect can be executed is the reach effect E development suggestion effect is possible. Since the period length L6a is set longer than the length of the period L6a, the reach effect E indicates that the reach effect F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach effect A, will be executed after the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since the ready-to-win performance E can be suggested for a longer period of time than when the ready-to-win performance E is executed after the execution of the development notification performance is suggested, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

Furthermore, although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when execution of the meter effect is not determined, the present invention is not limited to this. , the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when execution of the meter effect is determined. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the first stage increase timing.

Furthermore, since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development is possible while reach performance B is being executed. By executing the suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to the player recognizing that the variable display result is not reported as a jackpot as a performance result of the reach performance B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as a pattern that develops from reach performance B to reach performance E, after a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a pattern that develops from reach effect B to reach effect E, reach effect B is disclosed. A case may be provided in which the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result. In this way, when creating a case where the reach performance E development notification performance and the reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance B, when the reach performance E development notification performance and the reach performance E are executed, It may be possible to execute reach performance E development suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, during the execution of reach effect A to reach effect F, it is possible to execute a chance-up effect, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of player.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, during the execution of the reach effect A, the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves twice in total. While it is possible to execute the effects that make up the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. It is possible to perform a performance that constitutes a chance-up performance over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach η in a variation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect increases during execution of reach effect F than during execution of reach effect A, so that the reach It is possible to suitably draw the attention of the player to the performance result of the performance F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, during the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 and the cut While it is possible to perform the effects that make up the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of in-image 029SG200, during the execution of reach effect E, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as a chance-up effect. The effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed twice in total with the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach ζ in the variation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect is smaller during reach effect E than during reach effect B, so the reach effect Since it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the performance result of E, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, regarding the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ that executes reach effect E after execution of reach effect B, while the reach effect B is executed, the red display of the reach title and the movable body 32 and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, which constitutes a chance-up effect, can be executed three times in total.While reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is displayed as a chance-up effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display of super reach ζ in which reach effect E is executed after execution of effect B, while reach effect B is being executed, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be performed as while reach effect E is being executed. You can also use it as

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects that constitute the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a specific pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R output specific sounds, the light guide plate emits light, and the image display device 5 The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) at , the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be included in the effect constituting the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image, etc. All of these examples are performances that are performed regardless of the player's operations (active performances), but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect (active) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating an operating means such as a push button 31B or a stick controller 31A (so-called back button). (direction) may also be included.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figure 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is The reach performance of the super reach can be determined from the reach performance C and the reach performance D, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance C. Then, if the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed, the reach performance If reach performance G development notification performance is executed after reach performance I is executed and a variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is a reach with a lower jackpot expectation than reach performance I. Performance G is executed.

Furthermore, if the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and if the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, then reach performance I. Since the ready-to-win performance H, which has a low expectation of jackpot, is executed, the performance can be diversified by combining the type of reach-to-win performance and the development notification performance.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By deciding whether to perform reach performance C or reach performance D, the precursor performance is executed more when execution of reach performance C is decided than when execution of reach performance D is decided. Since the rate at which reach performance I (high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) is executed after reaching is set high, a predetermined relationship is created between the executed reach performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance. It is possible to improve the performance interest of reach performance and development notification performance.

In addition, this feature section 029SG determines the reach effect to be executed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern in which the reach effect C is executed during the variable display and the variation pattern in which the reach effect D is executed during the variable display are separately provided. may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the feature section 029SG determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern at different rates depending on the variable display results.In other words, the chance-up effect is a reach effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variable display result is executed as a performance that suggests a jackpot as a performance result, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the performance period of reach performance A to reach performance D. An executable chance-up performance may be executable as a performance that suggests that any of reach performance E to reach performance I will be executed (develop to any of reach performance E to reach performance I). .

Furthermore, as a chance-up performance, in addition to the variable display result becoming a jackpot or the execution of any of reach effects E to I, there is also a possibility of a jackpot game when the variable display result becomes a jackpot. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10, that the probability is changed after the end of the jackpot game, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, there are cases where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or D is executed, and cases where the reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In the case where reach performance H development notification performance is executed, the advance performance is executed because a common preliminary performance can be executed in the period between reach performance C or reach performance D and development notification performance. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the development notification performance, and to make the player pay attention to which of the development notification performances, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance H development notification performance, will be executed. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach effect C or reach effect D, the execution of these reach effect C or reach effect D It is suggested which of the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed later, and it is also suggested that both the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance and the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance are executed. Since it is possible to perform a possible branch destination suggestion performance, the execution of the development destination suggestion performance increases the player's attention to the execution of the development notification performance, and the reach performance H development notification performance. It is possible to draw a player's attention to which of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performances will be executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed as the development destination suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the development destination suggestion performance may be capable of suggesting that the reach performance G development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which the development destination suggestion performance can be executed by variable display of the reach performance C or the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach performance C has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to perform the development destination suggestion performance also in the variable display of the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect A and the variable display for the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a super reach performance in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance results are announced as reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the variation pattern of κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, the variable display result is a jackpot. When the variation pattern of super reach κ is displayed, the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 60%, while the variation pattern of super reach θ Since the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display is 40%, reach effect I depends on whether reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. It becomes possible to guess whether it is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ that is executed, or a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ that is executed with reach effect H, so reach effect C and reach effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot for the variation pattern of super reach κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ, reach effect C is displayed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the execution rate and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the present invention is not limited to this, in the case where the variable display result is a failure, the reach effect C is executed by variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which reach effect D is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is greater than the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 029SG, a configuration is exemplified in which a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are provided in which a pending storage display can be displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modification 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a lower part of the display area of the image display device 5) In the center), an active display area 029SG005F may be provided in which a pending storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, if it is possible to display the active display in this way, similar to the pre-read preview performance described above, there are multiple display modes for the active display, and depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, the jackpot can be expected. It may also be possible to perform active display effects with different degrees. For example, there are three types of active display modes: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and when the active display mode is a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is sufficient that the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest when it is displayed as a white circle (Jackpot expectation level of active display display mode: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the display mode of the active display can be changed from a red circle to a red circle. It may be possible to suggest that the displayed jackpot expectation level has increased.

In this way, if the display mode of the active display can be changed during variable display, the variable display result as the effect of reach effect B, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B). Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E is executed after (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle while reach effect E is executed. Let P1 be the rate at which the red circle changes.

In addition, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance A, and the reach performance F is further executed, active display is displayed during the execution of reach performance A. P2 is the rate at which the display mode changes from a white circle or blue circle to a red circle. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is executed, is displayed in the active display while the reach effect E is executed. P1, which is the rate at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, or when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red one while reach effect A is being executed. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing this, when a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of super reach η (when reach effect A is executed and reach effect F is executed), the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is By changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle shape before the start, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize in advance that the ready-to-reach effect F will be executed. In addition, when reach effect E is executed and when reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in reach effect F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than reach effect E. By changing to , the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red round shape according to the degree of jackpot expectation, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate of change P3 is higher than the rate P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η as in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach effect A. In addition to setting it higher than the ratio P2, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect E is being executed. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of the ready-to-reach effect B.

In this way, by providing a plurality of active display modes and varying the jackpot expectation depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the jackpot expectation. , the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before execution of the reach performance E development notification performance or the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, causing the player to recognize in advance that the expectation of a jackpot is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to such factors.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed and the reach performance I is executed without going through the reach performance such as reach performance A and reach performance B is determined. However, as modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from white circle or blue circle to red before the start of reach effect I. The rate P5 of changing to a round shape may be set higher than the rate P6 of changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before executing the reach effect I, the player is made aware in advance that the reach effect I will be executed. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio P5 of changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach effect I is set higher than the ratio P6 of changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, but in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. By doing this, it is possible to create a situation where reach effect I is executed without going through other reach effects even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle shape. It is possible to add surprise to the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, there are three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. Although we have exemplified a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on which display mode the pending memory display or active display is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and these pending memory displays or active display The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the above-mentioned modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display can be changed during execution of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the active The change timing of the display mode may include a timing other than when the ready-to-win effect is being executed, for example, during the execution of the development suggestion effect or the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, etc. Furthermore, if it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance including temporary stopping and re-variable display of decorative symbols during variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changeable at the timing of temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, there are three types of display modes for the pending memory display: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and depending on which display mode the pending memory display is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, the display form of the reserved memory table display may be a triangle, a square, or a star in addition to a round shape. Depending on which shape the pending memory display is displayed, it is suggested which reach effect will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, or reach effect I. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process and determines that the variation pattern (variation category) is super reach, it also determines which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ. (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command (including information on which super reach variation pattern is executed) according to the determination What is necessary is to transmit a variable category command) to the production control board 12. By doing so, the production control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from among round, triangle, square, star shape, etc. based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. . Furthermore, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the pending storage display even before the start of the variable display, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, a form that can suggest a reach effect that develops depending on the shape of the pending memory display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the pending memory display In addition to suggesting the expected level of jackpot, it may be possible to further suggest the reach effect of the development destination by the shape of the reserved memory display. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-4, a form in which a reach effect of the destination can be suggested by the shape of the pending memory display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the pending memory display The reach performance that can suggest the future may be only a part of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I). .

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, a mode is exemplified in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red halfway. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, the display mode of the expectation level image showing the jackpot expectation level displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, , increasing the number of stars displayed as an expectation image, etc.). By doing this, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the text color of the reach title image changes from black to red, so it is possible to increase attention to the expectation image. To allow a player to accurately recognize the degree of expectation of a reach performance.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, regarding the variable display of super reach κ in a variation pattern, there are cases where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C, and reach effect D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are displayed at different rates depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as modification 029SG-6, before the variable display results are announced as reach effect C or reach effect C during execution of reach effect C or reach effect C. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in which a highly anticipated reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set at a rate of 15%. The execution of pattern Decide on execution at a rate of 35%. In addition, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is The execution of pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher (the decision ratio of non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower) than when the variable display is being executed, the reach effect H It is possible to suitably suggest that a development notification performance, such as a development notification performance, a high-expected reach performance, and a development notification performance, will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than when the branch destination suggestion effect is When execution of performance C is determined, the execution determination ratio of branch destination suggestion performance is set lower than when execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Good too.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution determination rate for pattern Z of branch destination suggestion performance (performance pattern that suggests execution of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when it is determined, variable display is being executed. It is possible to more suitably suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a highly expected reach performance development notification performance will be executed, thereby improving game interest.

In addition, in modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the example shows a form in which the execution decision rate in pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than in the case where the execution decision rate is set higher than in the case where When the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ. The execution determination rate may be set low.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, there are cases where the reach performance of the super reach to be executed is reach performance C, and reach performance D. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance at different rates depending on the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach θ, Regarding the variable display of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the corresponding branch are determined at different rates depending on whether the super reach effect to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern of the advance suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, there is a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance C is being executed (the first advantageous result suggestion performance in the invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance D is being executed. (Second advantageous result suggestion performance in invention 033SG) is illustrated as an example of a form that can be executed as a performance of the same performance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of reach performance C. The executable branch destination suggestion performance and the branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed during execution of the reach performance D may be executable as performances of different performance modes.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I is executed. Regarding the notification mode in which a variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any of these reach effects A to D is simply executed and a variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing, in addition to the above-mentioned first notification mode, after the variable display result is once notified as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D, A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot.

In addition, as described above, the first notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of super reach, and variable display results are notified without developing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I. When providing a notification mode and a second notification mode, when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z. and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same. Good too.

In this way, reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as reach performance of super reach, and the second notification mode is used as a notification mode in which a variable display result is notified without developing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I. By providing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by being notified that the variable display result is a jackpot even though the variable display result is once reported as a loss. Furthermore, the performance results (variable display results) when performing the reach performance C and the reach performance D are announced in the first notification mode and in the second notification mode, and the branch destination suggestion performance is executed. Since the process for determining can be shared, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and a variable display result is notified without developing to any of reach effects E to I. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as modes, when the performance results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern. The ratio of execution in pattern Z and the ratio of execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode. Although the same form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as notification modes in which a variable display result is notified without developing, the performance result (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is the first alert mode. The rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when notified in the second notification mode, and the branch destination when the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z may be different.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and a variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. Regarding the mode, the first notification mode is simply that any of these reach effects A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is once removed as the effect of reach effects A to D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification Example 029SG -8, reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, and after it is announced that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of these reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G is executed and the variable display result is announced as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), The rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variable pattern is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The display may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed. By doing this, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution rate of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. Since the numbers can be made different, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot, and the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are the second notification mode. Although the example shows a different form from the rate at which the chance-up performance is executed in the variable display notified by, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot is shown as an example. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect in a plurality of effect patterns, and depending on which production pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. Examples are given of forms in which the rate at which the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is executed is different. In particular, in the feature section 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation reach performance development notification performance may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, at a rate of 99%).

In particular, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at an extremely high rate. In the case where the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though it was executed in Z, or in the case where the reach performance I is executed even though the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance was not executed (so-called A pattern of production contradiction) may also be provided. In addition, if such a pattern of performance contradiction is provided, only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, branch destination suggestion performance and reach performance I in performance pattern Z are executed with the pattern of performance contradiction. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise to the player, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z or a reach effect I is executed, a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the super reach θ is executed, an example is shown in which the execution determination ratio of the reach effect C and the execution determination rate of the reach effect D are different, but the present invention does not apply to this. However, as a modification 029SG-10, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-reach performance C and the execution determination ratio for the ready-to-reach performance D may be made the same for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the game is completed, the player can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, a form was exemplified in which the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result as the effect of reach effect C or reach effect D is (missing). ) is announced, and if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect from the execution of the reach effect development notification effect, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. (For example, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D. may be substantially the same) or may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ where is executed, the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect C is decided is smaller than the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, when execution of reach effect C is decided. The jackpot expectation level and the jackpot expectation level when execution of the reach effect D is determined may be the same. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and when reach effect is executed, when reach effect G development notification effect is executed, a variable display result is displayed as the effect of reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of the super reach θ variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level when execution of reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. Although the example shows a form in which the expectation level is the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach If it is possible to produce an effect in which the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a result of reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed, reach There is a small difference between the jackpot expectation level of Reach Performance C and the jackpot expectation level of Reach Performance D. The jackpot expectation level of C and the jackpot expectation level of reach performance D may be substantially the same) but may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed, and the stick is displayed as an operation promotion image as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. It is possible to display the image of the controller 31A, and the reach performance A to reach performance D, which are executed before the reach performance E development notification performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and the reach performance E development notification performance and high expectation In the above example, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be performed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F that are executed before the reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as a modified example 029SG-12, a common effect between the red display of these reach titles and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects from reach effect A to reach effect F. The jackpot expectation level may be set to differ depending on the situation. By doing this, while suppressing the increase in the number of performances that can be executed as chance-up performances (the number of performance patterns of chance-up performances), the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are Since the player can be made to pay attention to what is going on inside the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the variable display results indicate whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the performance of the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the result is a jackpot or a loss. Although a form in which a pattern can be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a chance-up performance and the performance pattern of the chance-up performance can be any one of reach performance E to reach performance I. may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not it is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification is announced before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when the performance and reach performance I are executed, the chance-up performance is different depending on when the execution of reach performance C is decided and when the execution of reach performance D is decided. It may also be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when reach effect D is decided to be executed, chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a higher rate than when reach effect C is decided to be executed. , when it is decided to execute the ready-to-win effect D, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode is such that after being once notified that the variable display result is a loss as the performance results of reach effect A to reach effect D, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a jackpot. (so-called restoration mode), but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. A revival effect may be performed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot between the time and the stop timing of the variable display.

In particular, when the revival performance is executed after the variable display result is once notified that the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D is a failure (the fluctuation of any one of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ) In the case where a variable display is executed in a pattern and a jackpot occurs), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length of the performance period L21 of the revival performance is changed to the reach performance. When reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed after the variable display result is notified that it is a failure as a performance result of B (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ The length L22 of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect (when the display is executed) to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing), and the effect results of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. When reach performance G development suggestion performance, reach performance G development notification performance, and reach performance G are executed after the variable display result is once notified that it is a failure (variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach θ) By setting it shorter than the length L23 of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing), the effect becomes redundant. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the above (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance E development suggestion performance to the reach performance E development notification performance. By setting the period shorter than L32, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display results can be It is possible to give a sense of surprise to the notification that the result is a failure.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-14, a mode was exemplified in which a revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified that the result is a failure as a result of reach effects A to D. This is not limited to, but when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance F are executed while the reach performance A is being executed (a variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach η and a jackpot occurs) ), when advance performance, precursor performance, reach performance H development notification performance, and reach performance H are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι) (in the case of a jackpot), when the advance performance, precursor performance, high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and reach performance I are executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ) Regarding the case where the display is executed and a jackpot is achieved, there may also be a case where a revival effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in the feature part 029SG, the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (jackpot expectation level) is the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed. Since it is set lower than the ratio (jackpot expectation level), if the variable display result becomes a jackpot, it will be notified that the variable display result is a loss as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the rate at which the resurrection effect is executed after reaching the target to be higher than the rate at which reach effect F, reach effect G, and reach effect I are executed and result in a jackpot, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and variable. Even if it is reported that the display result is a failure, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the revival effect is executed.

In addition, once reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed and a jackpot is achieved. (when a variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ and a jackpot is achieved), or after the variable display result is notified as a loss as a result of reach effect C or reach effect D, reach effect G A revival performance is also executed when the development suggestion performance, reach performance G development notification performance, and reach performance G are executed and a jackpot is achieved (when a variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and a jackpot is achieved). You may set up a case, but in the case where the variable display is executed with these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it will be announced that the variable display result will be off once before the revival performance, so In order to prevent the possibility that the variable display result will be out of reach as a result of the reach effect, the effect becomes redundant and the interest in the game decreases due to being notified more than once, super reach ζ and super If a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of reach θ and a jackpot occurs, the resurrection effect is not executed, or the variation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ is The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, although the mode in which the time saving state can be controlled after the end of the jackpot game has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the variable display is a specific number (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) may be possible to control the time saving state in response to reaching the variable display result, or in the case where the variable display result is an error, it may be possible to control the time saving state in response to a part of the error being derived and displayed. good.

In particular, when the time saving state is controlled in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case where the time saving state is controlled in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , it is also possible to perform a performance that notifies that the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance shown in the feature section 029SG or a revival performance shown in the modification 029SG-14 is controlled to a time-saving state after being executed. . By doing this, you can control the time saving state in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time saving state in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , Is it controlled to shorten the time by executing a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance or a revival performance, or is the variable display result notified that it is a jackpot?A highly anticipated reach performance such as reach performance I Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as the characteristic part 029SG, although a mode in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are implemented is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the inventions 029SG and the invention 033SG is implemented. You may also do so.

Further, in the feature section 029SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. The gaming machine 1) is a special suggestion presentation (for example, a reach presentation I) as a suggestion presentation suggesting that the machine will be controlled to the advantageous state, and the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the special suggestion presentation. A low first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E). Suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance processing shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performance including the first suggestion performance, and the performance result of the first suggestion performance are notified. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach (a part where an expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed), and after it is announced that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion performance, a special development performance different from the special development performance is performed in a second development pattern. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, reach effect E develops after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect of reach effect B. a development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10), and a development suggestion performance that suggests execution of at least the special development performance. (For example, a development suggestion performance execution means that can execute a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined. After determining the execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance, a part that executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. Performing a guidance display using an image display to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means, wherein when the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the suggested effect execution means improves the expectation level more than the first suggestion effect after execution of the special development effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification can be executed during the execution of the reach performance A. When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means (the part where the performance is executed and the reach performance F is further executed), the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the execution of the special development performance. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the result of reach effect B, the reach effect E development notification is (the part where the performance is executed and the reach performance E is further executed), the development suggestion performance execution means executes a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance as the first suggestion performance. It can be executed both during the execution period of the second suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, super reach α, super reach β, super reach In the variable display of variation patterns of δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, the meter effect can be performed during reach effect A and reach effect B), and the effect period of the special development effect is as described above. Longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance) (a portion longer than period length L6b), the special development effect includes a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a corresponding A secondary performance that is performed after the first performance and in which the previous stage information is displayed in a visible manner (for example, the first stage performance shown in Figures 11-10 and 11-55), and the second stage performance. A tertiary performance (for example, the latter stage performance shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent stage information that is executed after the previous stage information and has a higher degree of emphasis than the previous stage information is displayed in a visible manner; Including, the period from the execution of the special development performance until the notification that the control to the advantageous state is announced is longer than the period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) The length L13 of the period from the start timing of the highly expected reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F is the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E. (a portion set longer than the length L11 of the period up to the end timing (notification timing of variable display results)), the guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display, and the guidance display means , during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of a start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, The second guidance display is performed, and after completion of displaying the name of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is For example, there is a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display while the control ends, and continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state ends.

According to such a configuration, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled becomes excessively long, resulting in a game failure. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in the case where a special suggestion presentation is executed after the execution of a special development presentation, the special suggestion presentation is suitably applied to the player before being informed that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance. Further, an instruction that prompts the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction can be suitably executed.

In other words, depending on the type of development performance, the length of the performance period and the period from the execution of the development performance until the notification that it will be controlled in an advantageous state change, and the length can be adjusted to an appropriate length depending on the type of development performance. Since the advanced performance and the notification that the control is in an advantageous state are executed during the performance period, the interest in the game can be improved, and the first guidance display is performed during the predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. and a second guide display to emphasize an instruction to launch a game ball in a predetermined direction, and thereafter instruct to launch a game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guide display without taking over the first guide display. By not overemphasizing the instructions, it is possible to avoid the feeling of bothersomeness, and moreover, by first displaying the second guidance display, discreetly instructing the game ball to be launched in a predetermined direction, and then displaying the advantageous state. After the name is recognized, it is possible to firmly instruct the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction using the first guide display. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that can perform a plurality of types of advanced performances in an appropriate length of performance period when installed in a game parlor, and allows easy-to-understand instructions on the direction in which a game ball should be launched in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a game machine that can improve the game interest through advanced effects and suitably execute instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction, a variable display A gaming machine capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a display result becomes a specific display result, comprising a firing means capable of firing a gaming medium into a gaming area in response to an operation by a player; Guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the game medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the area. display means, the guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display, and the guide display means is configured to display information in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. , the second guidance display is performed before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, and the second guidance display is performed after the completion of the display of the name of the advantageous state. 1 guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued, and in a period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued, and the advantageous state control is ended. For example, there is a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the above-mentioned. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and a pre-read judgment. be exposed. The production control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening upper limit period for keeping the big winning hole open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 13(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as a "jackpot" special figure than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability of determining the special figure display result as a "small win" and controlling it to the small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and control to the small win game state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is a "small win" and is controlled to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 14, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 15-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 15-4), and the big winning hole door changes between an open state and a closed state (hereinafter referred to as (Usually called the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 15-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, closing the V big winning opening, and the game ball enters the V big winning opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when solenoid 075F083 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 15-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame lamp consisting of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with.

Here, FIG. 15-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a special LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the microcomputer 100 for game control, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the production control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 15-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 15-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 15-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 15-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 15-6 to 15-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 15-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 15-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 15-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 15-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 15-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 15-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 15-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 15-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 15-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 15-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 15-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 15-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 15-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 15-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 15-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 15-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 15-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 15-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 15-8) and a random number for jackpot determination, and determines that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values set in advance (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 15-8 (A) are set) and a table with a large number of jackpot determination values set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 15-8 (A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 15-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 15-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 15-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 15-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 15-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 15-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 15-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is immediately terminated.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 15-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 15-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 15-14, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 15-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 15-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIGS. 15-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIGS. 15-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIGS. 15-17 are flowcharts showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 15-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 15-18, in the jackpot production process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the contents of the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A1 series command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance during the round by controlling the performance device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 15-41). Set. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 15-42). At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after the opening of the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the effect (see Figure 15-43) that makes you aim for V. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening jackpot opening command (A203). The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed pointing to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed pointing to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the production (see Figure 15-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the already received jackpot start specification command (A0 series command), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see FIG. 15-44). .

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3-based command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the ending performance (FIGS. 15-46, 15) indicating the end of the jackpot game state. -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds, but the V big jackpot opens only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. In addition, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as in the 5R normal jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. A suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability-variable suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is a probability-variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that the probability variation jackpot is achieved. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or short-time state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first win, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion performance by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIGS. 15-19 are timing charts showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIGS. 15-20 are timing charts showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 15-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 15-19 to 15-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 15-19, at t1, when the first special figure game starts as the game ball enters the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a reservation storage number designation command to the production control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (such as the presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of performance, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and outputs a sound that encourages right-handed hitting from the speakers 8L and 8R, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 15-20, after that, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the mid-round performance in the 2R. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 15-41) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A102 command).

After that, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 15-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V performance (see FIG. 15-43) based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 15-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 15-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 15-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 15-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. In response to this, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 15-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in Figure 15-60, but may also include a character image or the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to indicate that no game is being played. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 15-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 15-22 (A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are illuminated by white painting as shown in Figure 15-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 15-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 15-23 to 15-33 and FIGS. 15-38 to 15-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 15-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-23 (b1) to 15-24 (b3) as a pending storage number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-23 (b1) to FIG. 15-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 15-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right hit display. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the production control CPU 120 inputs the data of each production shown in FIGS. 15-24 (c1) to 15-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right-hand hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-24 (c1) to FIG. 15-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 15-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses text and graphic image displays as described later in Figures 15-24 (c4) to 15-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 15-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 15-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 15-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 15-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare performance, following Figure 15-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example "BONUS!!" of the character image "CHANCE BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Fig. 15-24 (c4) to Fig. 15-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed batting") are displayed as an effect to promote right-handed batting. ) is displayed in a large size in the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 15-34 to 15-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 15-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 15-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 15-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 15-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 15-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 15-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. Note that in the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 15-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 15-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 that stores the data described above, as shown in Figures 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L, , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 15-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 15-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, for the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 15-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec remaining, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final light off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 that stores the data described above, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be changed as shown in Figures 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24). While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 15-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 15-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right hit promotion performance is started, the production control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 15-25 (c4), the production mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "right" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a text image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a text image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion performances.

As shown in FIG. 15-32 (c26), the second big right-handed hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right-handed hit promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for playing right-handed) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that is not output. can be made so as not to interfere with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 15-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round occurs as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage shown in FIG. 15-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-39 (d3) to 15-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-39 (d3) to FIG. 15-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. It should be noted that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed at the top right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, A fade-in is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 15-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade." For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 15-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 15-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e2), during the 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image promoting a small right hit ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 15-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e5) to 15-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-41 (e5) to FIG. 15-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-42 (e10) to 15-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-42 (e10) to FIG. 15-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a text image "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed together with a character image so as to overlap a background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be performed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is subsequently displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A203 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-44 (e14) to FIG. 15-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) for promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-44 (e16) to 15-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-44 (e16) to FIG. 15-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), when the V winning effect is executed, a message "" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round to indicate that a V winning effect has occurred. V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A204 command) specifying after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-45 (e19) to 15-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-45 (e19) to FIG. 15-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-46 (f1) to 15-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-46 (f1) to FIG. 15-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a text image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 15-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs a fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 15-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sends the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 15-48 (g3) to 15-49 (g5) to a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 15-48 (g3) to FIG. 15-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed in the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 15-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 15-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 15-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in Figures 15-25 (c4) to 15-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 15-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are performed during the round as shown in Figures 15-40 to 15-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 15-46 and 15-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 15-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in Figure 15-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-20. .

As shown in FIG. 15-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 15-24 (c2)) state), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), a performance image during 1R as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 15-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-20.

As shown in FIG. 15-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 15-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in Figure 15-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 15-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 15-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 15-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 15-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-20.

As shown in FIG. 15-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V notice performance as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 15-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 15-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V notice performance as shown in FIG. 15-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 15-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of jackpot when the player wins the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 15-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 15-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect to aim for V as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e14) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and the jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 15-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-57 assumes a power outage 7 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-21.

As shown in FIG. 15-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 15-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 15-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 15-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 15-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-21. Suppose.

As shown in Figure 15-58, when a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 15-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 15-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-21.

As shown in FIG. 15-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round performance during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 15-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 15-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 15-60 is assumed to be a power outage 10 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 15-21. .

As shown in FIG. 15-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 15-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed together with the image on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 15-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 15-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, the text image "Restoring..." will be displayed. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)), and A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (For example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the performance and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion performance),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 15-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 15-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)); a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)); and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (For example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 15-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 15-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 15-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e16), (The part that ends the image display corresponding to the aiming effect while continuing to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 15-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)); a second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)); and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13));
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (For example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, a grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in Figure 15-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-handed hit suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-handed hit suggestion effect) 15-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being displayed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed, but the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 15-51 and 15-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. (a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
The guide display includes a first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guide display (for example, FIG. 15-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1) to FIG. 15-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is finished, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 15-48 and 15-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5)) (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed driving promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the sound during the round is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L and 8R will respond to the big right-handed promotion effect. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed driving promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. 15-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (c26) to 15-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, a sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-39 (e1), after the start of the jackpot round, the sound during the round is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state or a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, Fig. 15-25 (c4) to Fig. As shown in 15-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 15-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 15-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 15-25 to FIG. 15- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guidance light is emitted in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect). (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 15-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 15-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 15-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 15-36 and 15-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Of the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIGS. 15-25 to 15-15). As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-25 to 15-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 15-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 15-38 (d1) to 15-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion performance involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball with the right hand.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (d1) to FIG. 15-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song), and switching to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a mode selection screen for selecting a production mode, and switching to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-49 (g5), as an example of displaying the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, you may use a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In any case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after a jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 15-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-25 (c4) to FIG. 15-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right-handed!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, the image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) to FIG. 15-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 15-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in Figure 15-39 (d3) to Figure 15-47 (f4) (from t4 in Figure 15-20 to Figure 15-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. However, this is not the only example. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R will make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a probability-variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the sound will be emitted from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random values are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the setting, so this is only possible if the setting values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a loss variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c2).

As in the example shown in Figure 15-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Fig. 15-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion effect is continued while the name image ("Time Saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare effect, and then, After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-25 (c4) to 15-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hitting promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hitting promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 15-48 to 15-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. Along with this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 15-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion performance may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning hole, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First starting port switch, 22B Second starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First holding indicator, 25B Second holding indicator, 25C Normal figure holding indicator, 30 Batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 120 CPU for effect control, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result,
Suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as the suggestion performance suggesting control to be in the advantageous state. and,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced , and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance ;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
A guide display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region ;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
When the start effect related to the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are performed, and in the subsequent period, while the first guidance display is ended, the second guidance display is performed. Displays information,
The guide light emitting means performs the guide light emission after turning off the light emitting means when executing the first guide display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images